chevrolet aveo owner manual - 2011 black plate (1,1) … · chevrolet aveo owner manual - 2011...

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual - 2011

2011 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-29Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-40

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76


2011 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLETEmblem, and AVEO are trademarksand/or service marks of GeneralMotors LLC, its subsidiaries,affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20927444 A First Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Sensing System for PassengerAirbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Trip Computer (US Only) . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceTire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑4.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑3.

C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 (If Equipped).

E. Clock on page 5‑5.

F. Data Link Connector (DLC).See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑14.

G. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑6.

H. Horn on page 5‑3.

I. Infotainment System. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7‑3.

J. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

K. Ashtray. See Ashtrays onpage 5‑7.

L. Cupholders on page 4‑1.

M. Cigarette Lighter. See CigaretteLighter on page 5‑6.

N. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3.

O. Glove Box on page 4‑1.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.


1-4 In Brief

Starting the EngineThe vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. It assists in starting theengine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned toSTART and then released when theengine begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a fewseconds or until the engine starts.If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent damage. To prevent geardamage, cranking is not allowed ifthe engine is running. Enginecranking can be stopped by turningthe ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. SeeStarting the Engine on page 9‑19.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 20 m (65 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Hatchback

Sedan

Press K to unlock all of the doors.

Press Q to lock all of the doors.

PressV and hold forapproximately one second to openthe trunk on the sedan model.

Press3 to sound the panic alarmon the hatchback model. Press anyof the buttons on the transmitter toturn off the alarm.


In Brief 1-5

The LED light (A) on the transmitterflashes when the buttons on thetransmitter are pressed. If the lightdoes not flash, the transmitterbattery needs to be replaced.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Door LocksFrom the outside, lock or unlock thedoor using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped.

From the inside, all of the doors canbe locked and unlocked by pushingor pulling the manual door lock oneach door.

On vehicles equipped with thecentral door unlocking system, lockor unlock all the doors from theinside using the driver door lockswitch.

For more information see:. Door Locks on page 2‑5.. Central Door Unlocking System

on page 2‑6.

LiftgateTo unlock the liftgate on thehatchback model from outside thevehicle, use the key in the lockcylinder or use the RKE transmitter,if equipped.

The handle is located above theright side of the license plate. Pullthe handle toward you and raise theliftgate.

To lock the liftgate, use the key orthe RKE transmitter, if equipped.

The liftgate can also be locked orunlocked by the central doorunlocking system.

For more information see Liftgate(Hatchback) on page 2‑9.


1-6 In Brief

Trunk Release

The vehicle may have a releasebutton located on the driver door.Press it to open the trunk.

The vehicle may have a trunkrelease lever located on theoutboard side of the driver seat. Pullthe lever to open the trunk.

For more information see Trunk onpage 2‑7.

WindowsManual Windows

Use the window crank to open andclose each window.

The rear windows do not open fully.

For more information see ManualWindows on page 2‑15.

Power Windows

On vehicles with power windows,the switches for all windows arelocated on the driver door armrest.Each passenger door has a switchfor its own window.

The ignition must be in ON/RUN touse the power windows. To lowerthe window, press and hold theswitch. To raise the window, lift upon the switch. Release the switchwhen the window reaches thedesired level.

For more information see PowerWindows on page 2‑15.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat to unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Seat Height Adjuster

Turn the knob on the outboard sideof the seat to adjust the height ofthe driver seat cushion.

Turn the knob forward to raise andrearward to lower.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Manual Lumbar

Move the adjustment lever on theoutboard side of the seatback up ordown to one of three positions toincrease or decrease the lumbarsupport.

The highest position provides themost support and the lowestposition provides the least support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.


1-8 In Brief

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Second Row SeatsThe rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

For detailed instructions see RearSeats (Sedan) on page 3‑6 or RearSeats (Hatchback) on page 3‑8.

Head RestraintAdjustmentThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

Do not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.


In Brief 1-9

Safety Belt

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑11.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑14.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑20.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑48.

Sensing System forPassenger AirbagThe passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag (if equipped)under certain conditions. The driverairbags are not affected by this.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible, near theclock, located in the center of theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

United States

Canada

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑31 for important information.


1-10 In Brief

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Manual Outside Mirrors

The controls for the outside manualmirrors are next to each mirror.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑13.

Power Outside Mirrors

The control is on the instrumentpanel, left of the steering wheel.

The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to adjust the mirrors.

1. Select the mirror by moving theselector switch to L for the driverside mirror or R for thepassenger side.

2. Press one of the four arrows onthe control pad to move themirror in the desired direction.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑13.

Interior Mirror

Hold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview behind your vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use and pullit for nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑14.


In Brief 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located under thesteering column, slightly to the left.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown into a comfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt lever whiledriving.

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The vehicle has a dome lamplocated in the overhead console.

Move the switch to the followingpositions:

ON: The light comes on andstays on.

O : The light comes on when adoor is opened. The light turns offwhen all the doors are closed.

OFF: The light remains off evenwhen a door is opened.

Be sure all doors and trunk lid orhatch are completely closed or thebattery may drain.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Dome Lamps onpage 6‑5

Exterior Lighting

Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

The lever on the left side of thesteering column operates theexterior lamps.

3 : Turns on the headlamps andother exterior lamps.

The headlamps automatically turnoff when the ignition key is turned toLOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.


1-12 In Brief

; : Turns on the parking lamps,together with the taillamps, licenseplate lamp, and instrument panellights.

OFF: Turns all the lamps off,except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Sedan Shown

Hatchback Shown

The lever is located on the right sideof the steering column. The ignitionmust be turned to ON/RUN tooperate the windshield wipers.

HI: Fast wipes.

LO: Slow wipes.

INT: Move to this position for adelayed wiping cycle. Turn the bandon the windshield wiper towardFAST or SLOW for a shorter orlonger delay between wipes. Thewiper speed can only be adjustedwhen the lever is in the INT position.

OFF: Turns the windshieldwipers off.


In Brief 1-13

Misting Function

Move the lever toward INT for asingle wiping cycle. Hold it thereuntil the windshield wipers start;then let go. For several wipes, holdthe band toward INT longer.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield washer/wiperlever toward you to spray washerfluid on the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3. For vehicles with a RearWindow Wiper/Washer, see RearWindow Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5.

Climate ControlsFor vehicles with these climate control systems, the heating, cooling, andventilation can be controlled for the vehicle.

Climate Control System with Heater and Air Conditioning

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning (A/C)

E. Air Recirculation

F. Rear Window Defogger


1-14 In Brief

Climate Control System with Heater Only


B. Fan Control


D. Rear Window Defogger

E. Outside Air/Recirculation

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

Hold Mode

If the vehicle's transmission hasHold Mode, you can select thismode to allow the automatictransmission to stay in a specificgear range. Select Hold Mode tohelp the vehicle maintain traction onslippery road surfaces, such assnow, mud, or ice.


In Brief 1-15

Press the HOLD button on the shiftlever console to turn on Hold Mode.Press the button again to turn offHold Mode, and return to normalautomatic transmission operation.

When Hold Mode is selected inD4 (Drive), the transmission is heldin 3 (Third) gear, which locks outD4 (Drive). This allows for enginebraking when slowing from higherspeeds.

When Hold Mode is selected in2 (Second), the transmission willstart in 2 (Second) gear instead of1 (First), helping to reduce wheelspin when starting out on slipperysurface such as snow, mud or ice.

Since selecting Hold Mode inD4 (Drive) locks the transmission in3 (Third), and prevents downshifts to2 (Second) or 1 (First), accelerationfrom a stop or near stop on drypavement will be slower thanexpected. Hold Mode should not beselected during these situations.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑25.

Cold Weather Shifting

When operating the vehicle insevere cold conditions, thetransmission may be preventedfrom shifting into D4 gear until thetransmission fluid has warmed up toits operational temperature.

Five-Speed ManualTransmission

Up‐Shift Light

Vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission may have an up-shiftlight. This light indicates when toshift to the next higher gear forbetter fuel economy.

For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when thelight comes on, if weather, road, andtraffic conditions allow.

It is normal for the light to go onand off if the accelerator positionchanges quickly. Ignore the lightduring downshifts.


1-16 In Brief

Reverse Lockout

The manual transmission isequipped with a lock ring to preventshifting into R (Reverse). To shiftinto R (Reverse), press downthe clutch pedal, lift up the ring onthe shift lever, and shift intoR (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑29.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD Shown

O : Press and release to turn thesystem on. Press and hold this knobfor more than two seconds to turnthe system off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

When the system is on, press andreleaseO to mute the system.

Press and releaseO again to turnthe sound back on.

BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,or XM™ (if equipped).

u SEEK: Press to seek the nextradio station with a strong signal inthe selected band.

t SEEK: Press to seek theprevious radio station with a strongsignal in the selected band.

[ TUNE: Press to go to the nextstation manually.

r TUNE: Press to go to theprevious station manually.

SCAN/AST: Press to scan radiostations. Press and hold to useAutomatic Store.


In Brief 1-17

CD/AUX: Press to play a CD whenlistening to the radio. CDP appearson the display when the CD playerhas been selected. The CD symbolwill appear on the display when aCD is loaded. Press CD/AUX whilea CD is playing to pause the CD.PAUSE flashes on the display.Press CD/AUX again to start playingthe CD. Press CD/AUX to play a CDwhen listening to the audio contentsfrom another device (AUX mode).CDP appears on the display whenthe CD player has been selected.The CD symbol will appear on thedisplay when a CD is loaded.

Press to play a CD while a portableaudio device is playing. Press CD/AUX a second time for the systemto begin playing audio from theconnected portable audio player.The portable audio device continuesplaying until it is turned off.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeIntroduction on page 7‑1.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned belowthe radio station frequency labelsand by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press theFAV button to go through up to sixpages of favorites, each having sixfavorite stations available per page.If Automatic Store is used, then fourpages of favorites are available.Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM,or XM™ (if equipped) stations.

See “Storing a Favorite Station”under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑3and CD Player on page 7‑10.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM satellite radio has awide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound.

A fee is required to receive the XMservice.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See “XM Satellite Radio Service”under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑3and CD Player on page 7‑10.


1-18 In Brief

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack, locatedon the lower right side of the audiofaceplate. External devices such asiPods®, laptop computers, MP3players, etc. can be connected tothe 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary inputjack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) inputjack cable.

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑3and CD Player on page 7‑10.

Steering Wheel Controls

Front View of the Steering WheelControls

Side View of the Volume Control

If the vehicle has this feature, someaudio controls can be adjusted atthe steering wheel.

PWR: Press and release to turn thesystem on and off.

When the system is on, press andrelease for a short time to mute thesystem. Press and release again toturn the sound back on.


In Brief 1-19

+ VOLUME − : Press thetoggle bar located below the+ VOLUME − to adjust the volume.

MODE: Press and release thisbutton multiple times to cyclethrough the audio playback optionsthat are available on the vehicle.

SEEK: Press and release to go tothe next preset station, or CD track.Press and hold for a long time to goto the next AM, FM, or XM station,or to fast forward through CD tracks.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

For vehicles with cruise control, thebuttons are located on the right sideof the steering wheel.

I /O : Press to turn the cruisecontrol on or off.

RES+: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET−: Press to set the speed ormake the vehicle decelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑32.

Trip Computer (US Only)The vehicle may have a tripcomputer. It provides the driver withdriving information such as thedriving distance for the remainingfuel, outside temperature, averagefuel economy, and driving time.

The trip computer button is locatedin the lower right area of thetachometer. Each time you press it,the display cycles through theavailable choices.

See Trip Computer (US Only) onpage 5‑21.


1-20 In Brief

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The accessory power outlet islocated next to the parking brake onthe center console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

The accessory power outlet isoperational when the ignition isturned to ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

Sunroof

On vehicles with this feature, theswitch is on the headliner betweenthe sun visors and can only beoperated when the ignition is turnedto ON/RUN.

To vent the sunroof, open thesunshade and then press and holdthe driver side switch. To close,press the passenger side switch.

To fully open the sunroof, press andhold the passenger side switch. Thesunshade will open with the sunroof.To close, press the driver sideswitch. Manually close thesunshade.

See Sunroof on page 2‑16.


In Brief 1-21

Performance andMaintenance

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑50.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a change engine oillight when it is necessary to changethe engine oil and filter.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.


1-22 In Brief

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handleinside the vehicle. It is locatedon the lower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. At the front of the vehicle, lift upon the secondary hood releaselever, located under the frontcenter of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and securely placethe hood prop into the slot onthe inner fender.

See Hood on page 10‑6.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.


In Brief 1-23

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Thisprogram provides technically trainedadvisors who are available 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year, to giveminor repair information or maketowing arrangements.

For more information see RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.chevyownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).


1-24 In Brief

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide a wide range ofsafety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, andHands‐Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStarservices are available on allvehicles. For more information seethe OnStar Owner's Guide or visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR

(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar'sservice. Service involving location


In Brief 1-25

information about your vehicle can’twork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to have aworking electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and your vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.If you try to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in yourvehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of your vehicle,damage to important parts of yourvehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. Push theQbutton and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light appears), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.Push theQ button to confirm thatthe OnStar equipment is active.


1-26 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Central Door UnlockingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Liftgate (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition,doors, and all other locks.

The key has a key code tag that thedealer or qualified locksmith canuse to make new keys. Store thisinformation in a safe place, not inyour vehicle.

Your vehicle may have an electronicimmobilizer designed to protect yourcar against theft. If so, only keyswith the correct electronic code canbe used to start the vehicle. SeeImmobilizer Operation on page 2‑12for additional information. If areplacement key or an additionalkey is needed, it must be purchasedfrom your dealer or certifiedlocksmith.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6for more information.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.

Hatchback

Sedan

The following functions may beavailable if the vehicle has RKE:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all of thedoors. If all of the doors and thetrunk or liftgate are closed, thehazard lamps flash once and thehorn will sound to indicate thatlocking has occurred and thetheft-deterrent system is active.



K (Unlock): Press to unlockall of the doors. The hazardlamps flash twice to indicate thatunlocking has occurred and thatthe theft-deterrent system isdeactivated. If the doors are notopened within 30 seconds, thedoors will lock again.

3 (Panic) (Hatchback): Press tosound the panic alarm. The hazardlamps will flash and the panic alarmwill stay on for about 30 seconds.Press any of the buttons on thetransmitter to turn off the alarm.

V (Remote Trunk Release)(Sedan): Press and hold forapproximately one second to openthe trunk.

The LED light (A) on the transmitterflashes when the buttons on thetransmitter are pressed. If the lightdoes not flash, see “BatteryReplacement” in this section.

The buttons do not operate and thetheft-deterrent system does notactivate if the key is in the ignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofive transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the LED onthe transmitter does not flash whenyou press the buttons.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw from the backof the cover and open the coverof the transmitter.

2. Pull the transmitter out of thecover and carefully turn thecircle cover of the transmitterunit toward open.

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery,positive side facing up.Use one three-volt, CR1620,or equivalent, type battery.

5. Turn the circle cover of thetransmitter unit toward close andput the transmitter unit in thecover.

6. Put the two halves back togetherand replace the screw. Makesure the cover is on tightly, sowater will not get in.

7. Test the transmitter operation.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From the outside, use your key orthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

To manually unlock the front doorsfrom the outside, insert the key andturn it counterclockwise. Tomanually lock the doors, insert thekey and turn it clockwise.

All doors, except for the driver door,can be locked by pushing down themanual door lock and then closingthe door. On vehicles with powerlocks, the driver door can only bylocked from the outside by using thekey or the optional RKE transmitter.

From the inside, all of the doors canbe locked and unlocked by pushingor pulling the manual door locklocated on each door.



Central Door UnlockingSystemThe vehicle may be equipped withthe central door unlocking system.This system is activated from thedriver door.

From the outside, lock or unlock allthe doors by using either the key orthe RKE transmitter, if equipped.From the inside, lock or unlock allthe doors by using the driver doorlock switch.

Door Ajar Reminder

If one of the doors, trunk, or liftgateis not closed properly while theignition is on, the door ajar light onthe instrument panel comes on andstays on until the doors are closed.

Safety Locks

The vehicle has safety locks oneach rear door that preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

Using the Safety Locks

1. Move the lever up to lock.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to theother rear door lock.

Notice: Pulling the inside doorhandle while the rear doorsecurity locks are engaged coulddamage your vehicle. Do not pullthe inside door handle while therear door security locks areengaged.

The rear doors on the vehiclecannot be opened from the insidewhile this feature is in use.



Opening a Rear Door When theSafety Lock is On

1. Unlock the door from the inside.

2. Open the door from the outside.

If you do not cancel the safety lock,adults or older children who ride inthe rear will not be able to open therear door from the inside.

Canceling the Safety Locks

1. Unlock the door from the insideand open the door from theoutside.

2. Move the lever down to unlock.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to theother rear door lock.

The rear door locks can now belocked and unlocked normally.

Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

To open the trunk on a sedan fromoutside of the vehicle, insert the keyinto the lock cylinder and turn thekey clockwise or use the RKEtransmitter, if equipped. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.



Remote Trunk Release

This feature allows the trunk to beopened from inside the vehicle. Thevehicle may have either a releasebutton or a release lever.

The vehicle may have a releasebutton on the driver door. Press it toopen the trunk.

The vehicle may have a trunkrelease lever on the outboard sideof the driver seat. Pull the lever toopen the trunk.

When closing the trunk, close fromthe center to ensure that it fullylatches.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk release

handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handle onthe underside of the trunk lid. Thishandle will glow following exposureto light. Pull the release handledown to open the trunk from theinside.



Liftgate (Hatchback)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


To unlock the liftgate on ahatchback from outside of thevehicle, insert the key in the lockcylinder and turn it counterclockwiseor use the RKE transmitter,if equipped.

The handle is above the right side ofthe license plate. Pull the handletoward you and raise the liftgate.



When closing the liftgate, close fromthe center to ensure that it fullylatches.

To lock the liftgate, insert the keyinto the lock cylinder and turn itclockwise or use the RKEtransmitter, if equipped.

The liftgate can also be locked orunlocked by the central doorunlocking system or RKEtransmitter, if equipped. See CentralDoor Unlocking System on page 2‑6and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent system.

The theft-deterrent system will notarm when you lock the doors usingthe key or the manual door lock.It arms only when you use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Arming the System

To arm the system, do the following:

1. Close the doors, the windows,the hood, and the trunk orliftgate.

Make sure that the windows areclosed, as the system can bearmed even if the windowsare open.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF andremove the key from the ignition.

If the key is inserted in theignition, the transmitter will notarm the theft-deterrent system.

3. Lock the doors by pressing thelock button on the RKEtransmitter.. The LED light on the

transmitter will flash once.. All of the doors will lock.. The hazard warning lamps

will flash once and the hornwill sound.

. The security light will flashcontinuously to indicate thatthe theft-deterrent system isarmed . The security light islocated on the center of theinstrument panel nearthe clock.



To avoid activating the alarm byaccident, do one of the following:. Unlock the driver or passenger

front door using the key.. Press the unlock button on the

RKE transmitter.

Unlocking a door any other way willactivate the alarm when a door orthe trunk or liftgate is opened.

If you do not want to arm thetheft-deterrent system, lock thevehicle using the key or the manualdoor locks.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:. Unlock the driver or passenger

front door using the key.. Press the unlock button on the

RKE transmitter.

‐ The LED light on thetransmitter will flash once.

‐ All of the doors will unlock.

‐ The hazard warning lamps willflash twice.

If the door is not opened or if theengine is not started within30 seconds after disarming thesystem using the transmitter, all ofthe doors will automatically lock andthe theft-deterrent mode will re-arm.

How the System Alarm isActivated

If a door or the trunk or liftgate isopened without using the key or theRKE transmitter, the horn will soundand the lamps will flash for up to30 seconds.

How to Turn Off the SystemAlarm

If the system alarm is active, it canbe deactivated using one of thefollowing methods:. Press one of the buttons on the

RKE transmitter.. Unlock the driver or passenger

front door using the key.

Otherwise, the alarm willautomatically stop after 30 seconds.The system will then lock the doorsand re-arm the theft-deterrentsystem.



How to Detect a TamperCondition

If the hazard warning lampsflash once when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter, thetheft-deterrent system alarm wasactivated while you were away.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThe vehicle may have a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The immobilizer system preventsthe vehicle from being started by anunauthorized person by isolating thepower supply to the ignition system,the fuel pump, and the fuel injectors.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition. You do not have tomanually arm or disarm the system.

The vehicle has a special key thatworks with the theft-deterrentsystem. There is a transponder inthe key head that is electronicallycoded. The correct key will start thevehicle. An invalid key immobilizesthe engine. If the key is everdamaged, you may not be able tostart the vehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle,if the engine does not start and thesecurity light flashes or comes on,there may be a problem with thetheft-deterrent system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another key. At this time, youmay also want to check the fuse.

See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑36. If the engine still doesnot start with the other key, yourvehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may befaulty. See your dealer who canhave a new key made.

Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. If you lose ordamage your keys, only a dealercan have new keys made.

If you are ever driving and thesecurity light comes on and stayson, you will be able to restart theengine if you turn it off. Thetheft-deterrent system, however, isnot working properly and must beserviced by your dealer. Yourvehicle is not protected by thetheft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual Mirrors

The controls for the outside manualmirrors are next to each mirror.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Power Mirrors

The control is on the instrumentpanel, left of the steering wheel.

The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to adjust the mirrors.



To adjust the mirrors:

1. Select the mirror you want toadjust by moving the selectorswitch to L for the driver sidemirror or R for the passengerside mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows onthe control pad to move themirror in the desired direction.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn it to its original position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with this feature:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors. See “RearWindow and Outside MirrorDefogger” under Climate ControlSystems on page 8‑1 for moreinformation.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview behind your vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use and pullit for nighttime use.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Manual WindowsUse the window crank to open andclose each window.

The rear windows do not open fully.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

On vehicles with power windows,the switches are on the driver door.In addition, each passenger doorhas a switch for its own window.

The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to use the power windows.To lower the window, press and holdthe switch. To raise the window, liftup on the switch. Release theswitch when the window reachesthe desired level.



Window Lockout

The window lockout is with thedriver power window switches.

Press the lockout button to disablethe rear window switches. Thedriver can still operate all of thewindows with the lockout on. Pressthe lockout button again to return tonormal window operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down thesun visors. You can also removethem from the center mount andswing them to the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

Vanity mirrors are on the back of thesun visors. Swing down the sunvisor to expose the vanity mirror.

Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with this feature, theswitch is on the headliner betweenthe sun visors.

The sunroof only operates when theignition is turned to ON/RUN. Thesunroof can be opened to a ventposition or it can be opened all ofthe way.



To open the sunroof to the ventposition, open the sunshade. Thenpress and hold the driver side of theswitch. To close the sunroof, pressand hold the passenger side of theswitch until the sunroof reaches thedesired position.

To fully open the sunroof, press andhold the passenger side of theswitch. The sunshade opens withthe sunroof. To close the sunroof,press and hold the driver side of theswitch. The sunroof will stop if theswitch is released during operation.Close the sunshade manually.

In both the vent and fully openpositions, the air flow can beadjusted by pushing and holding theswitch until the sunroof moves tothe desired position.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the tracks. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise, or plugging of thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromsunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Rear SeatsRear Seats (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Rear Seats (Hatchback) . . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-22Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-23Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-26When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-46

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-59


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechances of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push therestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The rear seats have headrests thatare adjustable up and down.

The head restraints and headrestsare not designed to be removed.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat to unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

Turn the knob on the outboard sideof the seat to adjust the height ofthe driver seat cushion.

Turn the knob forward to raise andrearward to lower.



Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

Move the adjustment lever on theoutboard side of the seatback up ordown to one of three positions toincrease or decrease the lumbarsupport.

The highest position provides themost support and the lowestposition provides the least support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.




1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Rear Seats

Rear Seats (Sedan)

Folding the Seatbacks

The rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold down the seatbacks:

1. Remove the safety belt strapfrom the safety belt guide bypulling it through the slot.

2. Push the head restraints all theway down.

3. Unlatch the center safety belt bypressing the red button on thebuckle.

4. Detach the center safety beltfrom the mini buckle by insertingthe ignition key into the slot inthe mini buckle, pressing therelease button, and allowing thebelt to retract.



5. Pull up the release knob locatedon top of either of the rearseatbacks.

6. Fold the rear seatback forwardand down.

Unfolding the Seatbacks


1. Hook the safety belts into thesafety belt guides.

2. Lift the seatback up and push itto its original position.

{ WARNING


3. Push down and rearward firmlyon the top of the seatbacks untilit latches securely in the fullyupright position.

4. To reattach the center seatsafety belt to the mini buckle,pull it from the retractor.

5. Push the latch plate at the endof the safety belt strap into themini-buckle until the mechanismclicks. Make sure the strap is nottwisted. The sliding latch platewill face the front of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

6. Insert the safety belt strap backinto the safety belt guide.



Rear Seats (Hatchback)

Folding the Rear Seats

The rear seats can be folded toincrease cargo space.

To fold the rear seats:

1. Lower the head restraintscompletely.

2. Unlatch the center safety belt bypressing the red button on thebuckle.

3. Detach the center safety beltfrom the mini buckle by insertingthe ignition key into the slot inthe mini buckle, pressing therelease button, and allowing it toretract.

4. Pull up the release knob, locatedon the top of the seatbacks, andfold the seatbacks forwardand down.



Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

5. Move the safety belt buckles andsafety belt in the center seatingposition out of the spacebetween the seatbacks and theseat cushion so they are not inthe way as the seat is beingfolded.

6. Firmly pull the release handleson the rear side of the seatcushion to unlock the seatcushion.

7. Lift the seat cushion up and flipit forward.

8. Clip the hook to the front seathead restraint to keep the rearseat secure.

Unfolding the Seats

To return the rear seats to thenormal seating position:

1. Unclip the hook from the frontseat head restraint.

2. Position the buckles in back ofthe seat latches when movingthe rear seats to the sittingposition.



Notice: Damage to the safety beltbuckle or rear seat lockingmechanism can occur if thesafety belt and buckles arepinched under the rear seatcushion. Do not place the safetybelt and buckles on the floorunder the rear seat cushion whenthe rear seat is put back to thesitting position.

3. Push the seat cushion down toits original position until itlatches securely. Try to pull upon the seat to make sure it islocked in place.

4. Hook the safety belts in theoutboard seating positions intothe retaining clips.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to be

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

sure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

5. Lift the seatbacks up and pushthem back to their originallatched positions.

6. Unhook the safety belts in theoutboard seating positions fromthe retaining clips.

7. Return the safety belt bucklesand the center seat safety belt totheir original position betweenthe rear seatback and the seatcushion. Make sure the straps ofthe safety belt and buckles arenot twisted.



8. To reattach the center seatsafety belt to the mini buckle,pull it from the retractor.

{ WARNING


9. Push down and rearward firmlyon the top of the seatbacks untilthey latch securely in the fullyupright position.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑11 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.



A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.



Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑38 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑41. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.



First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The

shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.




A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.




A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see Rear Seats (Sedan)on page 3‑6 or Rear Seats(Hatchback) on page 3‑8 forinstruction on reconnecting thesafety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let the

belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. If the belt stops before it reachesthe buckle, tilt the latch plate andkeep pulling until it can bebuckled.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑22.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructions onuse and important safetyinformation.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thebelt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑14.

To move it down, press the releasebutton (A) and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.



After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pressing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 3‑23.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.



Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑11 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑23.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑28.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarily

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

close to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted airbags.



{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑38 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑41.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver's frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.



The right front passenger's frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger's side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If your vehicle has seat-mountedside impact airbags for the driverand right front passenger, they arein the side of the seatbacks closestto the door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

In addition, your vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

The vehicle may or may not haveseat-mounted side impact airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑24.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare intended to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes.



Seat-mounted side impact airbagswill inflate if the crash severity isabove the system's designedthreshold level. The threshold levelcan vary with specific vehicledesign.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact airbags,deployment is determined by thelocation and severity of the sideimpact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsdistribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant'supper body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑28 for more information.



Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize theairbags inflated. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turn

the interior lamps off, and turn thehazard warning flashers off by usingthe controls for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.



In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑15.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag system.Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will bevisible, near the clock, located in thecenter of the instrument panel, whenthe vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words PASSENGER AIRBAGON and PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFor the symbols for on and off will bevisible, during the system check.

When the system check iscomplete, either the wordsPASSENGER AIRBAG ON andPASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or thesymbol for on and off will be visible.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑12.



The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped)under certain conditions. The driverairbags are not affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;

an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped), no systemis fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughthe airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), the off indicator willlight and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag or airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped) anytime thesystem senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbag or airbags to beenabled, the on symbol will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbagor airbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted side

impact airbag (if equipped),depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle whohas outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) onpage 3‑55 or Securing ChildRestraints (Rear Seat Position)on page 3‑59.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit, securethe child in the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicle, andcheck with your dealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult‐Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow the



system to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped):

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importanceof proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment other thanany that GM has approved for yourspecific vehicle. See AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36 for moreinformation about modifications thatcan affect how the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.



Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑12.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange your vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, front sensors, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim is



replaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑31.

If you have any questions aboutthis, you should contactCustomer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in

Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑12 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑29. See yourdealer for service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑12 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the frontseating positions.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.



To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑31 for additionalinformation.



When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

There are a couple of things youneed to know about using childrestraints in the rear seat:

If you use a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position (A), thesafety belts and the child restraintLATCH anchors for the rear outsideseating positions (B) will not beaccessible.

Therefore, you will not be able tosecure child restraints or havepassengers ride in the rear outsideseating positions.

If you use two child restraints (A) inthe rear outside seating positions,the safety belt for the center rearseat position (B) will not beaccessible.

Therefore, you will not be able tosecure a child restraint or have apassenger ride in the center rearseating position.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.



Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during drivingor in a crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained, inkit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

Hatchback models may havezippers over the lower anchorareas. If so, unzip the seat coverbelow the labels to access eachlower anchor.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.



Sedan

For sedan models, the top tetheranchors are located under thecovers behind the rear seat on thefiller panel. Pull open the cover toaccess the top tether anchors.Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Hatchback

For hatchback models, the toptether anchors (B) are located in therear cargo area, attached to theback wall (A) of the vehicle.Squeeze and pull the front part ofthe plastic cover to access the toptether anchors. Remove the cargo

shade before installing the toptether. The cargo shade shouldremain off while the top tether is inuse. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather than thefront seat. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑46 foradditional information.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.



Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Flip the cover to access thetop tether anchors.

2.3. For hatchback models,remove the cargo shadebefore installing the toptether. The cargo shadeshould remain off while thetop tether is in use.

2.4. Raise the headrest or headrestraint if the desiredseating position has anadjustable headrest or headrestraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

2.5. Route and tighten the toptether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the followinginstructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.



If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a headrest or headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.



3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system is

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

working properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑46.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) under certainconditions. See and PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑12 for more information onthis, including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑31 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for how toinstall your child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedusing a safety belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped), the offindicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you startthe vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑12.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed.





5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag or airbags are off, theoff indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the off symbol is not lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑31 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle's safety beltand let it go back all the way.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑48 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑46.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

Cupholders

Two cupholders are located in thecenter instrument panel, below theclimate control system. To use the

cupholder, push in on the cover,then pull it out. After use, push inthe cupholder until it latches.

There is also a cupholder located inthe rear of the center console.

Front Storage

The vehicle may have shopping baghooks on each front seatback. Liftthe headrest to access the hooks.


4-2 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-1Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Hold Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . 5-19Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-20

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Trip ComputerTrip Computer (US Only) . . . . 5-21

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located under thesteering column, slightly to the left.


5-2 Instruments and Controls

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown into a comfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt lever whiledriving.

Steering Wheel Controls

Front View of the Steering WheelControls

Side View of the Volume Control

If the vehicle has this feature, someaudio controls can be adjusted atthe steering wheel.

PWR (Power): Press and releaseto turn the system on and off.

When the system is on, press andrelease for a short time to mute thesystem. Press and release again toturn the sound back on.



+ VOLUME −: Press thetoggle bar located below the+ VOLUME − button to adjust thevolume. Press the left side of thetoggle bar, below the + (plus) sign toincrease the volume. Press theright side of the toggle bar, belowthe − (minus) sign to decrease thevolume.

MODE: Press and release thisbutton multiple times to cyclethrough the audio playback optionsthat are available on the vehicle.Options may include FM, AM, XM,CD, and AUX.

SEEK: Press and release to go tothe next preset station.

Press and hold for a long time to goto the next AM, FM, or XM station.The radio seeks stations only with astrong signal that are in theselected band.

When playing a CD, press andrelease to go to the next track.Press and hold to fast forwardthrough the tracks.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Sedan Shown

Hatchback Shown

The lever is located on the right sideof the steering column. The ignitionmust be turned to ON/RUN tooperate the windshield wipers.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

HI (High Speed): Fast wipes.

LO (Low Speed): Slow wipes.



INT (Intermittent): Move to thisposition for a delayed wiping cycle.Turn the band on the windshieldwiper toward FAST or SLOW for ashorter or longer delay betweenwipes. The wiper speed can only beadjusted when the lever is in theINT position.

OFF: Turns the windshieldwipers off.

Misting Function

Move the lever toward INT for asingle wiping cycle. Hold it thereuntil the windshield wipers start;then let go. The windshield wiperswill stop after one wipe. If morewipes are needed, hold the bandtoward INT longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑30.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Windshield Washer

To use this feature, the ignition mustbe turned to ON/RUN. Pull thewindshield washer/wiper levertoward you to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

The spray continues until the leveris released. The wipers will run afew times and either stop or willresume at the speed being usedpreviously. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluid.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.



Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

The vehicle may have a rearwindow wiper/washer.

Turn the rear wiper/washer band tooperate the rear window wiper/washer.

OFF: Turns the rear window wiper/washer off.

Z : Turns the rear wiper on forintermittent wipes.

Y : Sprays washer fluid onto therear window and the wiper operatescontinuously.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and rearwindow. Check the fluid level ifeither washer is not working. SeeWasher Fluid on page 10‑24.

ClockThere is a digital clock located inthe center of the instrument panel,above the center air outlets. Whenthe ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, the timeis displayed in the digital clock.There are three buttons for adjustingthe digital clock:

H (Hour): Press once to go forwardone hour. To go forward more thanone hour, press and hold the buttonuntil the correct hour is reached.

M (Minute): Press once to goforward one minute. To go forwardmore than one minute, press andhold the button until the correctminute is reached.

S (Set): Press to reset the time tothe nearest hour.

For example, if the set button ispressed while the time is between8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to8:00. If this button is pressed whilethe time is between 8:30 and 8:59,the display is set to 9:00.

After disconnecting the battery orreplacing the fuse, reset the clock.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The accessory power outlet islocated next to the parking brake onthe center console.



Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use. Theaccessory power outlet isoperational when the ignition isturned to ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑40.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterThe cigarette lighter is located to theright of the front ashtray. To use it,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, push thecigarette lighter in all the way andlet go. When it is ready, it will popback out.

Electrical accessories may not becompatible with the cigarette lighterand could result in blown vehicle oradapter fuses. If you experience aproblem see your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating will not allowthe lighter to back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating mayoccur to the lighter or heatingelement. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThe ashtray is located at the lowerpart of the center instrument panel.To remove the front ashtray forcleaning, open the ashtray fully,press in the retaining tab and pullthe bin out.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

United States Manual Transmission Shown, Canada and Automatic Transmission Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in both kilometersper hour (km/h) and miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can record thenumber of miles, used in the UnitedStates, or kilometers, used inCanada, traveled for up to two trips.

Cycle between the odometer andtrip odometers A and B by pressingthe reset button located in the lowerright area of the speedometer. Pressthe reset button to tell how manymiles or kilometers have beenrecorded on either Trip A or Trip Bsince the trip odometer was last setback to zero.

To reset each trip odometer to zero,press and hold the reset button. Thereset button resets only the tripodometer that is being displayed.Each trip odometer must be resetindividually.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedabove 6,500 rpm, the vehiclecould be damaged, and thedamages would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with thetachometer above 6,500 rpm.



Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

The fuel gauge indicates about howmuch fuel is left when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN.

When the tank nears empty, the lowfuel warning light will come on.There is still a little fuel left, but thevehicle's fuel tank should be filledsoon. See Low Fuel Warning Lighton page 5‑20 for more information.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is located.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The indicator moves a little whenturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

The vehicle has an engine coolanttemperature gauge. With the ignitionturned to ON/RUN, this gaugeshows the engine coolanttemperature.

If the gauge pointer moves into thered area, the engine is too hot.It means that the engine coolant hasoverheated.

If the vehicle has been operatingunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21.

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind a driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light comes on andstays on for several seconds, thenflashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe driver remains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion. If the driversafety belt is already buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.



Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag'selectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells if there is an electricalproblem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor, the airbagmodules, the wiring, and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑24.

This light comes on when thevehicle is started, and it will flash fora few seconds. When the light goesout this indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

If the airbag readiness light stays onor comes on while driving, theairbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑31 forimportant safety information. Thevehicle has a passenger airbag

status indicator near the clock,located in the center of theinstrument panel.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light PASSENGER AIRBAG ONand PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF orthe symbol for on and off, forseveral seconds as a system check.Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherPASSENGER AIRBAG ON orPASSENGER AIRBAG OFF,



or either the on or off symbol, to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped).

If the words PASSENGER AIRBAGON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped) isenabled (may inflate).

If the words PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF or the off symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped).

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light will come on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on, and theengine is not running, as a check toshow it is working.

It should go out when the engine isstarted. If it stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may have aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery. If a shortdistance must be driven with thelight on, turn off all accessories,such as the radio and air conditionerto help reduce the drain on thebattery.



MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It makes sure thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lampcomes on and stays on, while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Heeding the light canprevent more serious damage to thevehicle. This system assists theservice technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑4.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.



The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by doing thefollowing:. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑37. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A fewdriving trips should turn thelight off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑35.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, have your dealer checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.



Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programs toinspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel near the steering wheel. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

is on with the engine running,or if the light does not come onwhen the ignition is turned toON/RUN while the engine is off.

. the critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen if thebattery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemevaluates critical emissioncontrol systems during normaldriving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned to ON.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not fully release. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,carefully pull off the road and stop.The pedal may be harder to push ormay go closer to the floor. It maytake longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑74.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF or if the light comeson, stop as soon as possible andturn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system.If the light still stays on, or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. See your dealer.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the brakes will stillwork, but the antilock brakes will notwork. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, the antilockbrakes will not work and there is a

problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

The ABS warning light will come onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON/RUN. This is normal. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn if there isa problem.

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shiftlight.

When this light comes on, shift tothe next higher gear if weather,road, and traffic conditions allow.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑29 for more information.



Hold Mode Light

If the vehicle has this feature, thislight comes on when the Hold Modeis active.

If the HOLD mode light flashes,have the vehicle checked. See“Hold Mode” under AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑25 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitoring System, this light comeson briefly when the engine isstarted.

It provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitoring System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

Stop and check the tires as soon asit is safe to do, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. See Tires onpage 10‑42 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and then stayson steady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequence willrepeat with every ignition cycle. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑51 for more information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

If the vehicle has low engine oilpressure, this light will stay on afterthe engine is started, or come onwhile driving.



This indicates that the engine is notreceiving enough oil. The enginecould be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil light could also come on inother situations:. When the ignition is on but the

engine is not running, the lightwill come on as a test to show itis working. The light will go outwhen the ignition is turned on.If it does not come on with theignition on, there may be aproblem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

. If the vehicle comes to a hardstop, the light may come on for amoment. This is normal.

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

Change Engine Oil Light

The vehicle may have an engine oillife system that indicates when theoil needs to be changed.

When the change engine oil lightcomes on, it means that the engineoil needs to be changed.

Once the engine oil has beenchanged, the engine oil life systemmust be reset. After reset, thechange engine oil light goes out.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12, ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 andEngine Oil on page 10‑9 for moreinformation.



Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on when thevehicle is low on fuel.

The low fuel warning light comes onwhen there are approximately6.0 liters (1.7 gallons) of fuelremaining in the tank.

To turn the light off, add fuel to thefuel tank. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑37.

High-Beam on Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light

This light turns on whenever theDaytime Running Lamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)on page 6‑2 for more information.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with this feature, thefog lamps light will come on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light will go out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.



Cruise Control Light

If the vehicle has cruise control, thislight comes on whenever the cruisecontrol is set

The light will go out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑32 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

The door ajar light comes on andstays on until all doors, trunk andliftgate are closed and completelylatched.

If the key is in the ignition while thedriver door is open, a warning chimealso sounds.

Trip Computer

Trip Computer (US Only)The vehicle may have a tripcomputer. It provides the driver withdriving information such as thedriving distance for the remainingfuel, outside temperature, averagefuel economy, and driving time.

The trip computer button is locatedin the lower right area of thetachometer. Each time you press it,the display cycles through theavailable choices.



Range for Remaining Fuel

This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles thevehicle can be driven withoutrefueling.

The minimum display for the rangeis 45 miles. Once the minimumdisplay range is under 45 miles, youwill see dashes on the display.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even though

the same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

Outside Temperature

This display shows the approximateoutside temperature.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg).

This number is calculated based onthe number of mpg recorded sincethe last time this menu item wasreset. To reset the average fueleconomy, press and hold the tripcomputer button.

Driving Time

This display can be used as a timer.

The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset. The timer is onlyrunning while the vehicle is moving.To reset the driving time, press andhold the trip computer button.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesInadvertent Power BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

The lever on the left side of thesteering column operates theexterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band hasthree positions:

3 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamp. Instrument Panel Lights. Parking Lamps

The headlamps automatically turnoff when the ignition key is turned toLOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps, together with thetaillamps, license plate lamp, andinstrument panel lights.

OFF: Turns all the lamps off,except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).


6-2 Lighting

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerThe headlamps must be on for thisfeature to work.

Push the turn signal lever awayfrom you to turn the high beams on.

The3 light comes on in instrumentpanel cluster while the high beamsare on and the ignition is turned toON/RUN.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

Pull the turn signal/multifunctionlever toward you until the high-beamheadlamps come on, then releasethe lever to turn them off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes theheadlamps come on when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp band is in

OFF or in the parking lampposition.

. The parking brake is released.

An indicator light on instrumentpanel cluster comes on when theDRL system is on.

When the DRL system is on, thetaillamps, sidemarker lamps,parking lamps, and instrument panellights do not come on unless theexterior lamps control is turned tothe parking lamp or headlampposition.

The DRL system turns off when oneof the following conditions are met:. The ignition is off.. The parking brake is on.. The high-beam headlamps

are on.. The low-beam headlamps

are on.. The flash-to-pass feature

is used.

The regular headlamp systemshould be used when needed.


Lighting 6-3

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flasher buttonis located to the right of the climatecontrol system on the sedan.

| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑36.


6-4 Lighting

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, theyare controlled by the # bandlocated on the middle of the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

To use the fog lamps, the ignitionmust be turned to ON/RUN and thelow-beam headlamps or parkinglamps must be on.

Turn the band to # to turn the foglamps on. The band automaticallyreturns to its starting position whenreleased. The fog lamp indicatorlight comes on in the instrumentpanel cluster. See Front Fog LampLight on page 5‑20.

To turn the fog lamps off, turn theband to # again. The fog lampindicator light will go off.

The fog lamps will also turn offwhen the high-beam headlamps areturned on. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps will turn on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThis feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel for this feature islocated on the instrument panel tothe left of the steering column. Turnthe thumbwheel to brighten or dimthe lights.


Lighting 6-5

Dome LampsThe vehicle has a dome lamplocated in the overhead console.

Move the switch to the followingpositions:

ON: The light comes on andstays on.

O (Door): The light comes onwhen a door is opened. The lightturns off when all the doors areclosed.

OFF: The light remains off evenwhen a door is opened.

Be sure all doors and trunk lid orhatch are completely closed or thebattery may drain.

Lighting Features

Inadvertent Power BatterySaverThis feature is designed to protectthe vehicle's battery againstdrainage. If the exterior lampscontrol is left in the; or2position, the key is removed and thedriver door is opened, the lights willturn off automatically.

If the key is removed and the driverdoor is opened while the dome lampis on, the dome lamp will not turn offautomatically.


6-6 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Fixed Mast Antenna(Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Backglass Antenna(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

IntroductionDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.


7-2 Infotainment System

Operation

AM-FM Radio

Radio with CD

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press andrelease to turn the system on. Pressand hold this knob for more thantwo seconds to turn the system off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

When the system is on, press andreleaseO to mute the system.

Press and releaseO again to turnthe sound back on.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Mid/Treble): Pressto adjust the bass, midrange,or treble.

Adjusting the Bass

To adjust the bass:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below theBass tab on the display.

3. TurnO to adjust the setting.

4. The settings are saved afterfive seconds.

Adjusting the Midrange

To adjust the midrange:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below theMid tab on the display.





Adjusting the Treble

To adjust the treble:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below theTreb tab on the display.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

SOUND (Balance/Fade): Press toadjust the balance or fade.

Adjusting the Balance

To adjust the balance:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below theBal tab on the display.



Adjusting the Fade

To adjust the fade:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below theFad tab on the display.



Setting the EQ

SOUND (Equalization): Press toselect an equalization setting.

Setting the EQ

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below theP.E.Q. tab on the display. ThePop, Rock, Ctry, Voice, Jazz,Clas tabs appear on the display.

3. Press the pushbutton below thedesired selection to set the EQ.Pressing the same pushbuttonagain cancels the EQ setting.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Finding a Station (AM‐FMRadio)

BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,or XM™ (if equipped). The displaywill show the selection.







SCAN: Press to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next station. Press this buttonagain to stop scanning.

The radio only scans stations with astrong signal in the selected band.

AST (Automatic Store): Twelvepreset stations with the strongestreception in the area can beautomatically stored. The radio willonly scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected AM orFM band. If the Automatic Storefunction is started in the FM band,only FM stations are stored inpreset pages A1 and A2. If theAutomatic Store function is startedin the AM band, only AM stationsare stored in A1 and A2.A combination of AM, FM and XM(if equipped) stations can be storedmanually into the other four favoritepages.

To use Automatic Store:

1. Press and hold AST to use AutoStore mode.

2. Press the pushbutton below theON tab on the radio display.

3. Automatic Store searches forradio stations with a strongsignal and automatically setpresets A1 and A2 with newstations.

4. After all stations are set, pressthe pushbutton below the arrowtab on the radio display to returnto the main radio screen

To reset the automatically storedradio stations, press and hold AST.Then press the pushbutton belowthe RESE tab on the radio display.If no stations are stored on presetpages A1 and A2, the RESE optiondoes not appear in the radio display.When the Automatic Store functionis used, any stations that werepreviously set will be deleted andreplaced with new stations.

Finding a Station (Radio withCD, and Radio withSix‐Disc CD)

BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,or XM (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.





SCAN/AST: Press to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next station. The radio onlyscans stations with a strong signalin the selected band. Press SCAN/AST again to stop scanning.



Press and hold SCAN/AST to useAutomatic Store. The radio onlyscans stations with a strong signalin the selected band.

AST (Automatic Store): Twelvepreset stations with the strongestreception in the area can beautomatically stored. The radio willonly scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected AM orFM band. If the Automatic Storefunction is started in the FM band,only FM stations are stored inpreset pages A1 and A2. If theAutomatic Store function is startedin the AM band, only AM stationsare stored in A1 and A2.A combination of AM, FM, and XM(if equipped) stations can be storedmanually into the other four favoritepages.

To use Automatic Store:

1. Press and hold SCAN/AST touse Automatic Store mode.

2. Press the pushbutton below theON tab on the radio display.

3. Automatic Store searches forradio stations with a strongsignal and automatically setspresets A1 and A2 with newstations.

4. After all stations are set, pressthe pushbutton below the arrowtab on the radio display to returnto the main radio screen.

To reset the automatically storedradio stations, press and holdSCAN/AST. Then press thepushbutton below the RESE tab onthe radio display. If no stations arestored on preset pages A1 and A2,the RESE option does not appear inthe radio display. When theAutomatic Store function is used,any stations that were previously setwill be deleted and replaced withnew stations.

Storing a Radio Station

Drivers are encouraged to set upradio station favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using thepushbuttons, favorites button, andsteering wheel controls. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2.

A maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using the6 pushbuttons positioned below theradio station frequency labels andby using the radio favorites pagebutton (FAV button). Press the FAVbutton to go through up to six pagesof favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page.If Automatic Store is used, then fourpages of favorites are available.Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XM(if equipped) stations. To store astation as a favorite:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press and release the FAVbutton to display the page wherethe station is to be stored.



3. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons until abeep sounds. When thepushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that wasset will return.

4. Repeat the Steps 1 through 3 foreach radio station to be storedas a favorite.

To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press and hold FAV until theradio setup menu displays.

2. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thepushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

3. Press FAV to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites for the chosen numberof numbered pages.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satelite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. A service feeis required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Channel

BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,or XM. The display will show theselection.

u SEEK: Press to seek the nextXM channel.

t SEEK: Press to seek theprevious XM channel.

[ TUNE: Press to go to the nextXM channel.

r TUNE: Press to go to theprevious XM channel.

SCAN/AST: Press to scan XMchannels. The radio goes to achannel, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next channel.Press SCAN/AST again to stopscanning.

SCAN: Press to scan XMchannels. The radio goes to achannel, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next channel.Press this button again to stopscanning.



Storing an XM Channel

Drivers are encouraged to set upXM Channel favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using thepushbuttons, favorites button, andsteering wheel controls. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2.

A maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using the6 pushbuttons positioned below theradio station frequency labels andby using the radio favorites pagebutton (FAV button). Press the FAVbutton to go through up to six pagesof favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page.If Automatic Store is used, then fourpages of favorites are available.Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XMchannels. To store an XM channelas a favorite:

1. Tune in the desired channel.

2. Press and release the FAVbutton to display the page wherethe channel is to be stored.

3. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons until abeep sounds. When thepushbutton is pressed andreleased, the channel that wasset will return.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 foreach XM channel to be storedas a favorite.

To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press and hold FAV until theradio setup menu displays.

2. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thepushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

3. Press FAV to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio frequencytabs and to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of numberedpages.

XM Radio Messages

UPDATING: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

NO SIGNAL: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

LOADING: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

OFF AIR: This channel is notcurrently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

CH UNAVAILABLE: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.



RADIO ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio eight‐digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

CHECK XM TUNER: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.



Fixed Mast Antenna(Hatchback)Vehicles without OnStar® have afixed mast antenna that canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make surethe mast is still tightened to theantenna base located on the roof ofthe vehicle. If tightening is required,tighten by hand.

Backglass Antenna(Sedan)Vehicles without OnStar® have theAM-FM antenna integrated with therear window defogger, located in therear window. Make sure that theinside surface of the rear window isnot scratched and that the lines onthe glass are not damaged. If theinside surface is damaged, it couldinterfere with radio reception. Also,

for proper radio reception, theantenna connector at the top-centerof the rear window needs to beproperly attached to the post on theglass.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Because this antenna is built intothe rear window, there is a reducedrisk of damage caused by carwashes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, whenthe rear window defogger is turnedon, it could mean that a defoggergrid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must berepaired.

If adding a cellular telephone to thevehicle, and the antenna needs tobe attached to the glass, make surethat the grid lines for the AM-FMantenna are not damaged. There isenough space between the gridlines to attach a cellular telephoneantenna without interfering withradio reception.



Multi-Band AntennaVehicles with OnStar have amulti-band antenna located on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM/FM radio, OnStarand the XM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem. Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear reception.If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the AM/FM radio,OnStar, and the XM system may beaffected if the sunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD. It couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top ofthe CD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” earlier in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R orCD-RW has been handled. Handlethem carefully. Store CD-Rs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.



Playing a CD

Radio with CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD begins playing. A CDcan be loaded while the ignition is inthe OFF position.

When the CD is inserted, CDLoading appears on the display. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it will stay inthe player. When a CD is in theplayer and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the radio must beturned on before the CD will startplaying. When the ignition and radioare turned on, the CD will startplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

[ TUNE (Next Track):Press[ TUNE to go to the nexttrack. The track number will appearon the display. The player willcontinue moving forward throughthe CD with each press of[ TUNE.

r TUNE (Previous Track): Pressto go to the start of the current track.The track number will appear on thedisplay. The player will continuemoving backward through the CDwith each press ofr TUNE.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX: Press to play a CD whenlistening to the radio. CD Loadingappears on the display when the CDplayer has been selected. The CDsymbol will appear on the displaywhen a CD is loaded.

Press CD/AUX while a CD isplaying to pause the CD. PAUSEflashes on the display. Press CD/AUX again to start playing the CD.

Press CD/AUX to play a CD whenlistening to the audio contents fromother device (AUX mode). CDLoading appears on the displaywhen the CD player has beenselected. The CD symbol willappear on the display when a CD isloaded.

EJECT: Press to eject a CD. TheCD can be ejected when the ignitionor the radio is turned off.

INFO/DISP (Information/Display):: Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentMP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: SongTitle , Album Title, Artist, Bit ratemay appear.



RPT (Repeat): Press thepushbutton under the RPT tab onthe display to repeat the currenttrack, RPT appears on the display.Press the pushbutton again to stoprepeat.

RDM (Random): Press thepushbutton below the RDM tab onthe display to play tracks in random,rather than sequential order, RDMappears on the display. Press thepushbutton again to stoprandom play.

INT (Scan): Press the pushbuttonbelow the INT tab on the display tolisten to the first few seconds ofeach track on the CD, INTROappears on the display. Press thepushbutton again to stop scanningand the current track begins to play.

Using an MP3

MP3/WMA CD-R Disc Format

If you burn your own MP3/WMAdisc on a personal computer:. Make sure the MP3/WMA files

are recorded on a CD-R disc.. Do not mix standard audio and

MP3/WMA files on one disc.. Make sure each MP3/WMA file

has a .m3u or .wma extension,other file extensions mightnot work.

. Files can be recorded with avariety of fixed or variable bitrates. Song title, artist name,and album are available fordisplay by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version1 and 2.

. Make sure to finalize the discwhen burning an MP3/WMA discusing multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc allat once.

The player is able to read and playa maximum of 50 folders,5 sessions, and 999 files. Long filenames and folder names can usemore disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space onthe disc, minimize the length of thefile and folder names. An MP3/WMACD that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. Thesystem can support up to eightfolders in depth; however, keep thedepth of the folders to a minimum inorder to keep down the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback. If aCD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 5 sessions,and 999 files, the player lets youaccess and navigate up to themaximum, but all items over themaximum are ignored.



Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under theroot directory are accessed prior toany other directory.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advancesto the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audiofiles. The empty folder does notdisplay.

No Folder

When a CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functiondoes not function on a CD that was

recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

When a CD contains onlycompressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder, theradio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Play will begin from the first trackunder the root directory. When alltracks from the root directory havebeen played, play will continue fromfiles according to their numericallisting. After playing the last trackfrom the last folder, the player willbegin playing again at the first trackof the first folder or root directory.

File System and Naming

The song name in the ID3 tag isdisplayed. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as MP3/WMA)instead.

Track names longer than32 characters or 4 pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename do not display.

Playing an MP3/WMA

With the ignition in the ON/RUNposition, insert a CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The playerpulls the disc in. The CD shouldbegin playing. As each new trackstarts to play, the track number andthe song name will appear on thedisplay. If the ignition or radio isturned off with a CD in the player, itwill stay in the player. When a CD isin the player and the ignition isturned on, the radio must be turnedon before the CD will start playback.When the ignition and radio areturned on, the CD will start playingwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.



The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

Sound quality may be reduced dueto CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled.

DIR (Directory): Press to repeatthe tracks in the current directory.DIR displays.

Press DIR again to repeat the tracksin all of the directories. ALLdisplays.

Press DIR again to turn offrepeat play.

u SEEK t (Next/PreviousFolder) (in MP3/WMA Mode):Press to change the folder. If CD-Rdoes not have any folders, “ROOT”flashes on the display for ashort time.

[ TUNE (Next Track): Press theup TUNE arrow to go to the nexttrack. The track number displays.The player continues movingforward through the CD each timeTUNE is pressed.

r TUNE (Previous Track): Pressthe down TUNE arrow to go to thestart of the current track. The tracknumber displays. The playercontinues moving backward throughthe CD each time TUNE is pressed.

INFO/DISP (Information/Display):Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentMP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: SongTitle, Album Title, and Artist. BitRate might also display.

When information is not available,No Info displays.

Press this button for longer thantwo seconds to changedisplay mode.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only):Press the SOUND button for longerthan two seconds. The song title orother available information of a songscrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on.The scroll mode can be changedonly when the SOUND button ispressed for longer thantwo seconds.

CD Player Messages (Radiowith CD, and Radio withSix‐Disc CD)

CHECK CD: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.



. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. The format of the CD is notcompatible. See “Using an MP3”earlier in this section.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary DevicesThe infotainment system has a3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of thefaceplate. This is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary inputjack. An external audio device suchas an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, etc. can beconnected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input jack for use asanother audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliaryinput jack. When a device isconnected, press the radio AUXbutton to begin playing audio fromthe device over the vehiclespeakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjustthe volume. Additional volumeadjustments may have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is too quiet or too loud.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to listen tothe radio while a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input DeviceFound may display.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Press to playa CD while a portable audio deviceis playing. Press CD/AUX a secondtime for the system to begin playingaudio from the connected portableaudio player. The portable audiodevice continues playing until it isturned off.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Climate Control SystemsFor vehicles with these climate control systems, the heating, cooling, andventilation can be controlled for the vehicle.

Climate Control System with Heater and Air Conditioning


B. Fan Control


D. Air Conditioning (A/C)

E. Recirculation

F. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

Climate Control System with Heater Only


B. Fan Control


D. Rear Window Defogger

E. Outside Air/Recirculation

OFF: Turns the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature of the air flowing fromthe system.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. The fanmust be turned on to run the airconditioning compressor.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the rear outlets. Keep the areaunder the front seats clear to allowthe flow of air to the rearcompartment.

É (Defog): This mode clearsthe windows of fog or moisture. Airis directed to the windshield,floor, and side window outlets.When this mode is selected, thesystem automatically runs theair-conditioning. To defog thewindows faster, turn the temperaturecontrol to the warmest setting.



1 (Defrost): This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog orfrost. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.When this mode is selected, thesystem automatically runs theair-conditioning. To defrost thewindows faster, turn the temperaturecontrol to the warmest setting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Forvehicles with air conditioning, followthese steps to use the system. Turn9 to the desired speed. The airconditioning does not operate whenthe fan control knob is in the offposition. Press A/C to turn the airconditioning on and off. When A/Cis pressed, an indicator light comeson to show that the air conditioningis on.

For quick cool down on hot days, dothe following:

1. Open the windows to let hot airescape.

2. Press?.

3. Press A/C.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest9 speed.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside of the vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in thevehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

? (Recirculation): This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle. It canbe used to prevent outside air andodors from entering the vehicle.

For vehicles with a recirculationbutton, press the button to turn therecirculation mode on. An indicatorlight comes on to show that therecirculation is on. Press the buttonagain to return to outside air mode.

For vehicles with a lever, move thelever to choose therecirculation mode.

Using the recirculation mode forextended periods may cause thewindows to fog. If this happens,select the defrost mode.



: (Outside Air): This modebrings outside air into the vehicle.

For vehicles with a recirculationbutton, press the button until therecirculation mode is turned off. Thevehicle then returns to the outsideair mode.

For vehicles with a lever, move thelever to choose the outsideair mode.

Rear Window and OutsideMirror Defogger

For vehicles with a rear window andoutside mirror defogger, they onlywork when the ignition is turned toON/RUN.

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog or frostfrom the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear window andoutside mirror defogger on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the feature is on.

If the vehicle does not have airconditioning, the rear windowdefogger may turn off about10 minutes after the button ispressed. If it remains on, it can beturned off by pressing< again orby turning off the engine.

If the vehicle has air conditioning,the rear window defogger turns offabout 10 minutes after the button ispressed. The defogger can also beturned off by turning the engine off.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Air VentsTo open an outlet, press on itscover. Turn the cover to change thedirection of the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterFor vehicles with a passengercompartment air filter, it is locatedbehind the glove box. It can beaccessed after removing the glovebox from its housing.

Pollen and dust are removed by thefilter. The filter should be replacedas part of routine scheduledmaintenance. For a replacementfilter see your dealer. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for replacement intervals.

To change the passengercompartment air filter, use thefollowing steps:

1. Open the glove boxhalfway down.

2. Grip the glove box by both theupper and lower sides and pull itout of its housing.

3. Remove the filter cover.

4. Replace the air conditioner filter.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-29

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-35California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑11.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.



Medical research shows that alcoholin a person's system can makecrash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord,or heart. This means thatwhen anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑4.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑4.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thesystem is not functioning, thevehicle can be steered but it willtake more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because there isno room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes— but, unless the vehiclehas antilock brakes, not enough tolock the wheels. See Braking onpage 9‑3. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.



An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right front

tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.



Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance will belonger and vehicle control morelimited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may notrealize the surface is slippery untilthe vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

If the vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), remember: It helpsavoid only the braking skid. If thevehicle does not have ABS, then ina braking skid, where the wheelsare no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes toget the wheels rolling again. Thisrestores steering control. Push thebrake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long asthe wheels are rolling, you will havesteering control.



Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑42.

. Turn off cruise control.



Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

even none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑30 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.


(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑61.



Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheels aslittle as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑74.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight ormaximum load amount andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B‐pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑42 andTire Pressure on page 10‑48.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. See “Certification Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 ‐ 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).



5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Your vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passenger,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example ‐ United States

Label Example ‐ Canada

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the centerpillar (B‐pillar), below the driverdoor latch. This label tells youthe gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).



The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fueland cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

If there is a heavy load, it shouldbe spread out. See “Steps forDetermining Correct Load Limit”earlier in this section.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

{ WARNING

On manual transmission vehicles,turning the key to LOCK/OFF willlock the steering column andresult in a loss of ability to steerthe vehicle. This could cause acollision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle ismoving, turn the key only to ACC/ACCESSORY. Do not push thekey in while the vehicle is moving.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.



LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.

This position locks the steeringwheel, ignition, shift lever andtransmission. This is the onlyposition in which you can insert orremove the key.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑31

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition operates some of theelectrical accessories, such as theradio, but not the climate controlsystem.

ON (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running. If you leave thekey in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position with the engineoff, the battery could be drained.You may not be able to start thevehicle if the battery is allowed todrain for an extended period of time.

START: This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginecranks, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving. Do not turn the key toSTART if the engine is running.



Starting the Engine

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be inN (Neutral) and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedal tothe floor and start the engine. Thevehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine cranks, let goof the key. The idle speed will godown as the engine gets warm.

The vehicle has a Computer‐Controlled Cranking System.It assists in starting the engineand protects components. If theignition key is turned to STARTand then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until the enginestarts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventdamage. To prevent geardamage, cranking is not allowedif the engine is running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Holding the key in STARTfor longer than 15 seconds at atime will cause the battery to bedrained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage thestarter motor. Wait about15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining the battery ordamaging the starter.

2. If the engine does not start, waitabout 15 seconds and try again.Wait about 15 seconds betweeneach try.

When the engine has run about10 seconds to warm up, thevehicle is ready to be driven. Donot run the engine at high speedwhen it is cold.

If the weather is below freezing(0°C or 32°F), let the engine runfor a fewminutes to warm up.



3. If the engine still will not start,or starts but then stops, it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forabout three seconds. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, do the same thing,but this time keep the pedaldown for five or six seconds.This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If electrical parts oraccessories are added, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with anengine heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated in the driver side of theengine compartment, near thebattery.



3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑31 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pressing the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold thebrake pedal down. Then see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pushing theshift lock release button. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift your transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).

This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, see“Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission)” in this section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).



Shifting Out of ParkVehicles with an automatictransmission have a shift interlocksystem. You have to apply the brakepedal before you can shift fromP (Park) when the ignition is in theON/RUN position. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑25.

If you cannot shift out of P (Park)while holding the brake pedal down,try this:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition off and removethe key.

3. Remove the hole cover from theshift lock slot by prying it offusing a small, flat object. Theshift lock release slot is locatedat the top of the shift lever.

4. Insert the key into the shift lockslot and press and hold the key.

5. Shift to N (Neutral).

6. Remove the key from the slot,insert the key into the ignitionand start the engine.

7. Replace the shift lock releaseslot cover.

8. Apply and hold the brake pedalfully and release the parkingbrake.

9. Shift to the gear you want.

10. Have the vehicle fixed as soonas you can.

Parking (ManualTransmission)Before leaving the vehicle, do thefollowing:

1. Hold the brake pedal down andfirmly apply the parking brake.

2. Fully press in the clutch pedaland place the shift lever into thegear position as stated below:. When parking on level

ground, place the shift leverinto N (Neutral).

. When parking downhill,place the shift lever inR (Reverse).

. When parking uphill, placethe shift lever in 1 (First).

3. After shifting, turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF, remove the key andrelease the clutch.



Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenit is on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe automatic transmission shiftlever to P (Park), or the manualtransmission shift lever to Neutral.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. If thevehicle has an automatictransmission, see Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission) onpage 9‑21.

AutomaticTransmission

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever islocated on the console between theseats.

Movement between certainpositions requires pushing therelease button on the front of theshifter.



P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑21.

Ensure that the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to apply the brakepedal before you can shift fromP (Park) when the key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park) while holding the brakepedal down, see Shifting Out ofPark on page 9‑23.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

When shifting from N (Neutral) toR (Reverse), you need to apply thebrake pedal and push the releasebutton on the front of the shifter.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whilethe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.



Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D4 (Automatic Overdrive): Thisposition is for normal driving.

When operating the vehicle insevere cold conditions, thetransmission may be prevented fromshifting into D4 gear until thetransmission fluid has warmed up toits operational temperature.

Notice: If the vehicle seems tostart up rather slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in 2 (Second) when you aredriving less than 55 km/h (35mph)and D4 (Automatic Overdrive) forhigher speeds until then.

2 (Second): This position gives youmore power but lower fuel economy.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,while using the brakes off and on.

Notice: Do not drive in 2 (Second)at speeds over 105 km/h (65mph),or you can damage thetransmission. Use D4 (AutomaticOverdrive) as much as possible.Do not shift into 2 (Second)unless you are going slower than105 km/h (65mph) or you candamage the engine.

1 (First): This position gives youeven more power but lower fueleconomy than 2 (Second). You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. If the shift lever is putin 1 (First), the transmission will notshift into first gear until the vehicle isgoing slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

If there is a malfunction with theautomatic transmission, themalfunction indicator lamp or theHOLD indicator light will turn on orflash. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑14.

Have the vehicle fixed as soon aspossible.



Hold Mode

If the vehicle's transmission hasHold Mode, you can select thismode to allow the automatictransmission to stay in a specificgear range.

Press the HOLD button on the shiftlever console to turn on Hold Mode.The HOLD light on the instrumentpanel cluster will turn on. Press thebutton again to turn off Hold Mode,and return to normal automatictransmission operation.

When Hold Mode is activated, thetransmission runs as follows:

Selector LeverPosition Gear Range

D4 Third Gear

2 Second Gear

1 First Gear

See Hold Mode Light on page 5‑18.

When Hold Mode is selected inD4 (Drive), the transmission is heldin 3 (Third) gear, which locks outD4 (Drive). This allows for enginebraking when slowing from higherspeeds.

When Hold Mode is selected in2 (Second), the transmission willstart in 2 (Second) gear instead of1 (First), helping to reduce wheelspin when starting out on slipperysurfaces such as snow, mud, or ice.

Since selecting Hold Mode inD4 (Drive) locks the transmission in3 (Third), and prevents downshifts to2 (Second) or 1 (First), accelerationfrom a stop or near stop on drypavement will be slower thanexpected. Hold Mode should not beselected during these situations.



Manual TransmissionFive-Speed

This is your shift pattern.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then, slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as youpress the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) when youare going less than 32 km/h(20 mph). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto 1 (First), put the shift lever in

N (Neutral) and let up on the clutch.Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and 5 (Fifth):Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and5 (Fifth) the same way you do for2 (Second). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to N (Neutral).

N (Neutral): Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, pressdown the clutch pedal, lift up thering on the shift lever and shift intoR (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Also, use R (Reverse), along withthe parking brake, for parking thevehicle.

Shift Speeds

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.



Up‐Shift Light

Vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission may have an up-shiftlight. This light indicates when toshift to the next higher gear forbetter fuel economy.

For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when thelight comes on, and if the weather,road, and traffic conditions allow.

It is normal for the light to go on andoff if the accelerator positionchanges quickly. Ignore the lightduring downshifts.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)The vehicle might have the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

If the vehicle has ABS, this warninglight comes on briefly when thevehicle is started.

The warning light is on theinstrument panel cluster. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 5‑17.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes andcontinue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letantilock work. You might feel a slightbrake pedal pulsation or hear somenoise, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

At some time, nearly every drivergets into a situation that requireshard braking.

If the vehicle has ABS, it allows thedriver to steer and brake at thesame time. However, if the vehicledoes not have ABS, the firstreaction— to hit the brake pedalhard and hold it down—might be

the wrong thing to do. The wheelscan stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to thedriver's steering. Momentum willcarry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stoppedrolling. That could be off the road,into the very thing the driver wastrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If the vehicle does not have ABS,use a “squeeze” braking technique.This gives maximum braking whilemaintaining steering control. Do thisby pushing on the brake pedal withsteadily increasing pressure. In anemergency, you will probably wantto squeeze the brakes hard withoutlocking the wheels. If you hear orfeel the wheels sliding, ease off thebrake pedal. This helps retainsteering control.

In many emergencies, steering canhelp more than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is locatedbetween the bucket seats.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑16.



To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thebrake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Cruise ControlFor vehicles with cruise control, aspeed of about 39 km/h (24 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 39 km/h(24 mph).

When the brakes are applied, or theclutch pedal if you have a manualtransmission, the cruise controlturns off.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the right side of thesteering wheel.

I /O (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control on or off.

RES+ (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set thespeed and activate cruise control ormake the vehicle decelerate.



Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon after the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed.

1. PressI /O to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Accelerate to the speed desired.

3. Press the SET− button andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratepedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, or the clutch pedal ifyou have a manual transmission,the cruise control is disengagedwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 39 km/h (24 mph) or more,press the RES+ button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.

If the RES+ button is held, thevehicle speed will continue toincrease until the button is releasedor the brake pedal is applied. Do nothold in the RES+ button, unless youwant the vehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the RES+ button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the RES+button. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The accelerate feature only worksafter the cruise control is turned onby pressing the SET− button.



Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press the SET− button until the

lower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,briefly press the SET− button.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on the

accelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlturns off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal,

or press the clutch pedal, if youhave a manual transmission.

. PressI /O on the cruisecontrol pad.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheI /O button or if the ignitionis turned off.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasolineshould meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑36 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑14. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.



However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. The

malfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

To open the fuel filler door, pull upon the release lever with this symbolon it. It is located on the floor on theoutboard side of the driver seat.



Hatchback Shown. Sedan Similar

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. See“Washing the Vehicle” in ExteriorCare on page 10‑76.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would

allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑14.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type fuel cap might not fitproperly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑14.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-23Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-28Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-33

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)(Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-35Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-69

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-74Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84


Vehicle Care 10-3

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories tothe vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealer andask for GM Accessories, you willknow that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts,and tools before attemptingany vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records on page 11‑9.


10-6 Vehicle Care

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handleinside the vehicle. It is locatedon the lower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. At the front of the vehicle, lift upon the secondary hood releaselever, located under the frontcenter of the hood.

3. Lift the hood and release thehood prop from its retainer,located on the underside of thehood. Securely place the hoodprop into the slot on the innerfender.


Vehicle Care 10-7

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop from theslot in the inner fender andreturn the prop to its retainer.The prop rod must click intoplace when returning it to theretainer to prevent hooddamage.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm(12 inches) above the vehicleand release it so it fully latches.Check to make sure the hood isclosed and repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

Automatic Transmission Shown, Manual Transmission Similar


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

C. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See “Brake Fluid” under Brakeson page 10‑24 and HydraulicClutch on page 10‑15.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.See Cooling System onpage 10‑17.

E. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑37.

F. Battery on page 10‑27.

G. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

I. Automatic TransmissionDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑23.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil.”

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil.”

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do WithUsed Oil.”

If the engine oil pressure lightcomes on, check the engine oil levelright away. The oil pressure light ison the instrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5‑18. Check the engine oillevel regularly; this is an addedreminder.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground. The engine oildipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking your oil level too soonafter engine shut off will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN(minimum) mark on the dipstick, addone liter/quart of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” foran explanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above the uppermark that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils with thedexos™ certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of yourvehicle should have the dexos™certification mark on the container.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos™ specification.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Notice: Use only engine oil that isapproved to the dexos™specification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexos™specification will show thedexos™ symbol on the container.Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you areunsure whether your oil isapproved to the dexos™specification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos™ is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos™ approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Use of oils that do not meet thedexos™ specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should


10-12 Vehicle Care

be used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, be sure to always select anoil that meets the requiredspecification, dexos™. See“Specification” for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexos™specification and displaying thedexos™ certification mark are allthat is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has the Engine Oil LifeSystem, a computer system thatindicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil lightdisplays. Change the oil as soon aspossible within the next 1 000 km(600 miles). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary forup to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and, at this time, the system


Vehicle Care 10-13

must be reset. Your dealer hastrained service people who willperform this work and reset thesystem. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly over the course ofan oil drain interval and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the change engine oil light comesback on when the vehicle is started,the engine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Check the automatic transmissionfluid level at least twice a year. Addfluid if needed. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be decided tohave this done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif the vehicle has been driven:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic— especially in

hot weather.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 70°C to 80°C(158°F to 176°F).


10-14 Vehicle Care

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 miles) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), you may have to drivelonger.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off theengine, follow these steps:

1. Locate the automatictransmission dipstick which islocated toward the front of theengine compartment, near thepower steering fluid reservoir.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑8 for moreinformation on location.

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean rag or paper towel.

3. Push the dipstick back in all theway, wait three seconds, andthen pull it back out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick.The fluid should be between theMIN (A) and MAX (B) mark ofthe hot area of the dipstick.

5. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind oftransmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bringthe level into the area between thetwo dimples in the hot range on thedipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, addenough fluid at the dipstick holeto bring it to the proper level.

It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pint).Do not overfill.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑6.

3. After adding fluid, recheck thefluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid” earlier inthis section.

4. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible. See

Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 for theproper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThere is one reservoir for both thebrake and the hydraulic clutch fluid.See Brakes on page 10‑24 for moreinformation.

The hydraulic clutch linkage in thevehicle is self-adjusting. The mastercylinder reservoir is filled withhydraulic fluid.

A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thefluid level in the master cylinderreservoir and for the proper fluid.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6.

How to Check and Add Fluid

The reservoir is located near theback of the engine compartment onthe driver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for more information onlocation.

To check the fluid level, look on theside of the reservoir. If the fluidreaches the MAX (A) mark on thereservoir, the fluid level is correct.If the fluid does not reach theMIN (B) mark on the reservoir, thenfluid needs to be added.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the passenger side of thevehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑8 for moreinformation on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 for moreinformation. If you are driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter to

release loose dust and dirt. If thefilter remains caked with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

1. Remove the screws and lift offthe cover.

2. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

3. Put the cover back on tightly andtighten the screws.

See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for replacement intervals.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View)

B. Coolant Surge Tank withPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX‐COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000miles(50 000 km) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolantin the vehicle.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in the vehicle'scooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the propermixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for thecooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 formore information.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not betweenthe Minimum and Maximum marks,add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant at the coolant surge tank,but be sure the cooling system is

cool before this is done. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑18 for moreinformation.

The engine coolant surge tank islocated in the rear of the enginecompartment on the driver side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for more information onlocation.

{ WARNING

Turning the surge tank pressurecap when the engine and radiatorare hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out andburn you badly. Never turn thesurge tank pressure cap— even alittle—when the engine andradiator are hot.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be between theMaximum (A) and Minimum (B)marks on the coolant surge tank.The level rises at engine operationtemperature and drops again whenthe engine cools down.

The coolant should be between theMaximum (A) and Minimum (B)marks, when the engine is cold. If itis not, there could be a leak in thecooling system.


10-20 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise abouttwo or two and one-half turns.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. This will allow anypressure still left to be ventedout the discharge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressurecap slowly and remove it.


Vehicle Care 10-21

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to theMaximum mark on the coolantsurge tank. Wait about5 minutes, then check to see ifthe level is below the mark. If thelevel is below the Maximummark, add additional coolant tobring the level up to the mark.

Repeat this procedure until thelevel remains constant at theMaximum mark for at leastfive minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower than the Maximum mark,add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant surge tank untilthe level reaches the mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof the engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge on the instrument panelcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑11.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine. Have the vehicleserviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off,if equipped.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.


Vehicle Care 10-23

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zone oran overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated toward the front of theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for reservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

The level should be above the MINmark on the reservoir. If the leveldrops below the MIN mark, addpower steering fluid. Do not overfillthe reservoir and remember toreplace the cap tightly when finishedand clean up any spilled fluid.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Alwaysuse the proper fluid. Failure to usethe proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has front disc brakesand could have rear drum brakes orrear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,they do not have wear indicators,but if a rear brake rubbing noise isheard, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Rear brakedrums should be removed andinspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing.Drum brakes have an inspectionhole to inspect lining wear duringscheduled maintenance. When thefront brake pads are replaced, havethe rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every moderate brake stop, the discbrakes adjust for wear. If rarelymaking moderate or heavier brakestops, the brakes might not adjustcorrectly. Very carefully making afew moderate brake stops aboutevery 1 600 km (1,000 miles) willadjust the brakes properly.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakesand the brake pedal goes downfarther than normal, the rear drumbrakes might need adjustment.Adjust them by backing up andfirmly applying the brakes a fewtimes.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑8 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thefluid level in the reservoir mightgo down:. The fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes and/or clutchwill not work well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Always clean the brake/clutch fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.


Vehicle Care 10-27

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled onthe vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑70 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


Vehicle Care 10-29

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in neutral.

On all vehicles, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. See“Wiper Blade Check” for moreinformation.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For the proper type,see Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑8.

Here is how to remove and replacethe windshield wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

2. Press the retaining clip (A) andpull the wiper blade off the arm.

3. Install a new blade by reversingSteps 1 and 2.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to the dealerfor service.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑35.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace a headlamp bulb:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑6.

2. Remove the three bolts toremove the headlamp assembly.

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the rear ofthe bulb.

4. Remove the headlamp cap.

5. Release the spring that retainsthe bulb by loosening the screw.

6. Remove the old bulb and installthe new bulb.

7. Install the bulb retaining springand tighten the screw.

8. Reinstall the headlamp cap.

9. Reconnect the wiring harness atthe rear of the bulb.


10-32 Vehicle Care

10. Reinstall the headlampassembly using the three bolts.

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLampsTo replace a front turn signal orparking lamp bulb:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑6 for more information.

2. Remove the three bolts toremove the headlamp assembly.

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the rear ofthe bulb.

4. Turn the front turn signal bulbsocket counterclockwise.

5. Pull the front turn signal bulbsocket out of the lamp housing.

6. Press the bulb inward and turn itcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the bulb socket.

7. Install the new bulb into thesocket by pressing it in andturning it clockwise.


Vehicle Care 10-33

8. Install the socket into the lamphousing by turning it clockwise.

9. Reconnect the wiring harnessconnector at the rear of the bulb.

10. Reinstall the headlampassembly using the three bolts.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up LampsTo replace a taillamp, turn signallamp, stoplamp, or back-up bulb:

1. Open the liftgate or trunk. SeeLiftgate (Hatchback) on page 2‑9or Trunk on page 2‑7.

Hatchback

Sedan

2. Remove the two screws and thelamp assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and removethe socket.

4. Press the bulb in and turncounterclockwise to remove itfrom the socket.


10-34 Vehicle Care

5. Press the new bulb in and turnclockwise to install the bulb intothe socket.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall.

7. Reinstall the lamp assembly andtwo screws.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)(Hatchback)To replace a CHMSL bulb on thehatchback:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Hatchback) on page 2‑9 formore information.

2. Pull down on the lamp assemblywhile holding the end of thebracket.

3. Remove the lens cover using aflat head screwdriver.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)(Sedan)To replace a CHMSL bulb on thesedan:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑7 for more information.

2. Remove the two screws and thelamp housing. Disconnect thewiring harness connector beforeremoving the lamp housing.

3. Remove the five screws and thereflector assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-35

4. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the bulb holder.


6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lamps.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp toward you through theopening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.


5. Push the bulb straight into thesocket and turn clockwise toreinstall.

6. Push and turn the license platelamp away from you through theopening.

7. Reinstall the two screws holdingthe license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamps 94535571

CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp(CHMSL)

94535587

Front Parking/TurnSignal Lamps

94535578

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Front SidemarkerLamps

94535578

Headlamps 94535548

LicensePlate Lamp

94535587

Rear SidemarkerLamps

94535577

Rear Turn SignalLamps

94535572

Stoplamp/Taillamps

94535577

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuitbreakers, and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located on the driver side of thevehicle, near the battery. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑8 for more information onlocation.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To access the fuses, press in theside flaps to release the cover. Toreinstall the cover, push the coveruntil it is secure. Fuses Usage

FAN HICooling Fan HIRelay

ABS‐1 EBCM

Fuses Usage

ABS‐2 EBCM

SJB BATTInstrument PanelFuse Block


10-38 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

ACC/IG1 IGN1 Relay

IG2/STIGN2 Relay, StarterRelay

ACC/RAPInstrument PanelFuse Block

P/WINDOW‐2

Power WindowSwitch

P/WWINDOW‐1

Power WindowSwitch

FAN LOWCooling Fan LOWRelay

A/CON A/C CompressorRelay

Fuses Usage

PKLP LH

Tail Lamp (LH),Side Marker (LH),Turn Signal &Parking Lamp (LH),License Lamp

PKLP RH

Tail Lamp (RH),Side Marker (RH),Turn Signal &Parking Lamp(RH), LicenseLamp, I/P FuseBlock

ECU ECM, TCM

FRT FOGFront Fog LampRelay

Fuses Usage

F/PUMP Fuel Pump Relay

HAZARDHazard Switch,Hood ContactSwitch

HDLP HI LHHead Lamp(LH), IPC

HDLP HI RH Head Lamp (RH)

IPC IPC

HDLP LO LHHead Lamp (LH),I/P Fuse Block

HDLP LO RH Head Lamp (RH)

EMS‐1 ECM, Injector

DLIS Ignition Switch


Vehicle Care 10-39

Fuses Usage

EMS‐2

EVAP CanisterPurge Solenoid,Thermostat Heater,HO2S, MAFSensor

SPARE Not Used

Relays Usage

F/PUMPRELAY Fuel Pump

STARTERRELAY

Starter

PARK LAMPRELAY

Park Lamp

Relays Usage

FRONT FOGRELAY

Fog Lamp

HDLP HIGHRELAY

Head Lamp High

HDLP LOWRELAY

Head Lamp Low

FAN HIGHRELAY

Cooling Fan High

FAN LOWRELAY

Cooling Fan Low

A/CONRELAY

Air Conditioner

Relays Usage

ENGINEMAIN RELAY

Main Power

ACC/RAPRELAY

I/P Fuse Block

IGN‐2RELAY

Ignition

Misc. Usage

FUSEPULLER Fuse Puller


10-40 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated on the end of the instrumentpanel on the driver side of thevehicle.

To access the fuses, open the fusepanel door by pulling the door out.

To reinstall the door, first insert therear edge of the fuse panel door,then push the front of the door intothe end of the instrument panel tosecure it.

Fuses Usage

AUDIOAudio, Clock,Immobilizer

AUDIO/RKE

A/C Switch, Clock,Power Mirror Unit,Audio, Anti-TheftModule, TPMS

Fuses Usage

B/UP LAMPPNP Switch,Reverse LampSwitch

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used


Vehicle Care 10-41

Fuses Usage

BLANK Not Used

CIGAR Cigar Lighter

CLUSTERBrake Switch,TPMS, Anti‐TheftModule

DEFOGMIRROR

Power Mirror Unit,A/C Switch

RR DEFOG Rear Defog

DOOR LOCK Door Lock

NA DRL NA DRL Circuit

MIRROR/SUNROOF

Mirror ControlSwitch, RoomLamp, A/C Switch

EMS1Engine Room FuseBlock, TCM, VSS,Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

EMS2 Stoplamp Switch

HORN Horn

OBD DLC, Immobilizer

CLUSTER/ROOM LAMP

Trunk Room Lamp,Trunk OpenSwitch, IPC,Room Lamp

SDMSensing andDiagnostic Module

Fuses Usage

SOKET Power Jack

STOP LAMP Brake Switch

SUNROOFSunroofModule (Option)

T/SIG Hazard Switch

WIPERWiper Switch,Wiper Motor


10-42 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have a blowout and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Under inflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when yourtires are cold.

. Over inflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If your tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only yourdealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger car tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Passenger Car Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured. TheTIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one sidemay have the date ofmanufacture.

(D) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(E) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑58.

(F) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑48 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and should not bedriven at speeds over 65 mph(105 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. See Compact SpareTire on page 10‑69 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10‑61.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑69 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to60 psi (420 kPa). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

(F) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger car tire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U. S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 70, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is70% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).


10-46 Vehicle Care

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weight ofoptional accessories. Someexamples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑48.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT code

includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑48 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑55.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards):A tire information system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into the

sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑58.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.


Vehicle Care 10-49

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.

The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one. The compactspare should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑69.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under‐inflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).


10-50 Vehicle Care

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.


Vehicle Care 10-51

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑51 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. If your vehicle hasthis feature, the TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle's tires and transmit tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument panel cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycle untilthe tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure.


10-52 Vehicle Care

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andneed to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12, for an example of the tireinformation label and its location onyour vehicle. Also see Tire Pressureon page 10‑48.

Your vehicle's TPMS system canwarn you about a low tire pressurecondition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See TireInspection on page 10‑53, TireRotation on page 10‑54, and Tireson page 10‑42.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. The low tire warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light should go offonce you re‐install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.


Vehicle Care 10-53

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑56.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight comes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor IdentificationCodes

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time youreplace one or more of the TPMSsensors, or rotate the vehicle's tires,the identification codes need to bematched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matched,to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage at least oncea month.

Always remove the tires if any ofthe following statementsare true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 miles). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that your vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate your tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑55 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑60 formore information.

When rotating your tires, alwaysuse the correct rotation patternshown here.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe tire and loading informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12 for an example ofthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel and where it is located onyour vehicle. Make certain that

all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel NutTorque” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

See your dealer to reset the TirePressure Monitor System(TPMS) after rotating the tires,if a tire pressure monitorreception error occurs.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-55

WARNING (Continued)

wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑61.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑54 and TireRotation on page 10‑54 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnot being used. Multiple conditionsaffect how fast this aging takesplace, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. Tires willtypically need to be replaced due towear before they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. If youneed replacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tires thatare the same size, brand, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction type (radial andbias‐belted tires) as the vehicle'soriginal tires. This way, the vehiclewill continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the originaltires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 10‑42 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing tires insets of four. This is because uniformtread depth on all tires will helpkeep the vehicle performing mostlike it did when the tires were new.Replacing less than a full set of tirescan affect the braking and handlingperformance of the vehicle. See TireInspection on page 10‑53 and TireRotation on page 10‑54.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. You or otherscould be injured or killed if youattempt to mount or dismount atire. Only your dealer or anauthorized tire service centershould mount and dismount thetires.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It is allright to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, asit was developed for use onyour vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑69.


Vehicle Care 10-57

{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low‐pressure warning iftires not recommended for thevehicle are installed. Tires that donot match the original equipmenttires could give a low‐pressurewarning that is higher or lower thanthe proper warning level you wouldget with original equipment tires.See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑50.

The vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12,for more information about the Tireand Loading Information label andits location on the vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑56 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑4 foradditional information.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporary

use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it,except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired.See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑61 for more information.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains onlywhere legal and only when youmust. Use only SAE Class“S”type chains that are the propersize for your tires. Install them onthe front tires and tighten them astightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chainmanufacturer's instructions.If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.


10-62 Vehicle Care

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunder-inflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely under-inflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.


Vehicle Care 10-63

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fall onyou or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or evenkilled. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The compact spare tire and toolsyou will need are located in thetrunk.

A. Jack

B. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack Handle

D. Screwdriver (if equipped)

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. SeeTrunk on page 2‑7 or Liftgate(Hatchback) on page 2‑9.

2. Lift the trim cover.

3. Remove the foam tray.

4. Remove the jack, the jackhandle, and the wheel wrenchfrom the foam tray.

5. Turn the retainercounterclockwise and remove itfrom the compact spare.

6. Remove the compact spare tire.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑69 for more information.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑61.

2. If your vehicle has wheel covers,turn the four plastic capscounterclockwise by hand or byusing the wheel wrench. Theplastic nuts do not come off ofthe cover.

3. Remove the wheel cover usingthe flat end of the jack handle.Pry along the edge of the wheelcover until it comes off.

Store the wheel cover in thecargo area until you have the flattire repaired or replaced.

4. Turn the wheel nutscounterclockwise to loosenthem. Do not remove them yet.

Hatchback


10-66 Vehicle Care

Sedan

5. Locate the notch in the framenear each wheel which the jackhead fits in.

6. Position the jack and raise thejack head until it fits firmly intothe notch in the vehicle's framenearest the flat tire.

7. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

8. Insert the jack handle into thejack and the wheel wrench ontothe end of the jack handle.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

9. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the compact spare tireto fit underneath the wheel well.

10. Turn the wheel nutscounterclockwise toremove them.

11. Remove the flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-67

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑61.

12. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces and spare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

14. Install the wheel nuts with therounded end of the nuts towardthe wheel. Tighten each nut byhand clockwise until the wheelis held against the hub.


10-68 Vehicle Care

15. Lower the vehicle by turningthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts in

the proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store a flat or compact spare tireand tools:

1. Store the flat tire or the compactspare in the compact spare tirecompartment.

2. Secure the retainer.

3. Store the tools securely in thefoam tray and place the trayback in the cargo area.

4. Replace the trim cover.


Vehicle Care 10-69

The compact spare tire is fortemporary use only. Replace thecompact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 10‑69.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire was fullyinflated when the vehicle was new, itcan lose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 414 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon your vehicle, you should stop assoon as possible and make sureyour spare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is intended toperform well at speeds up to80 km/h (50 mph), so you can finishyour trip and have your full-size tirerepaired or replaced where youwant. Replace your spare with afull-size tire as soon as you can.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use your compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix your compact spare tireor wheel with other wheels or tires.Keep your spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑27.

If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use vehicles with12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start yourvehicle. If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start your

vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-71

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thebatteries. Find the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑8 for moreinformation on location.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you don't, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some things you shouldknow. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.


Vehicle Care 10-73

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least 45 cm(18 in) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move.

The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle needs to be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6.

If the vehicle has lost battery power,the shift lever needs to be manuallyreleased to neutral for towing. See“Shift Lock Manual Release” underShifting Out of Park on page 9‑23.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as behind amotorhome, for recreationalpurposes, see Recreational VehicleTowing following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as a motor home.The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. If the vehicle must betowed, a dolly should be used. See“Dolly Towing” that follows for moreinformation.

Dolly Towing From the Front

The vehicle can be towed from thefront using a dolly. To tow thevehicle using a dolly, follow thesesteps:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Put an automatic transmission inP (Park) or a manualtransmission in N (Neutral).

4. Set the parking brake andremove the key.

5. For an automatic transmission,insert the key into the shift lockrelease slot and shift toN (Neutral). See Shifting Out ofPark on page 9‑23.

6. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

7. Release the parking brake.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing From the Rear

Notice: Towing the vehiclefrom the rear with the frontwheels on the ground couldcause transmission damage. Donot tow the vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on theground.

Appearance Care

Exterior CareSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired.

Washing the Vehicle

The best way to preserve thevehicle's finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal, or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturers'directions regarding correct productusage, necessary safetyprecautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.


Vehicle Care 10-77

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8 274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle.”

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To helpkeep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap and abuildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because they coulddamage the surface. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before being

flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or20 000 km (12,000 miles) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage canresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. When

cleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.


Vehicle Care 10-81

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

The vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that can

transfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage canresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.


10-82 Vehicle Care

. Use only mild, neutral‐pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Do not use organic solventssuch as naptha, alcohol, etc.Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Before

cleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plainwater.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather/Leatherette

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.


Vehicle Care 10-83

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Your dealer has a GMapproved leather cleaner availablethat provides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally. Donot use heat, steam, spot lifters orspot removers, or shoe polish onleather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner

Instrument Panel, Vinyl andother Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatingsthat are sold to preserve andprotect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by one hook-type retainer.

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat toremove it from the hooks.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the openings on the floor matover the hooks and push it downinto position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

General InformationNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps to keepthe vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information under

Scheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑35.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑5.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trained servicetechnicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipment toensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑8. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑54.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilLight Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9. AnEmission Control Service.

When the change engine oil lightdisplays, service is required for thevehicle as soon as possible, withinthe next 1 000 km/600 miles.If driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your dealer hastrained service technicians who willperform this work and reset thesystem. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 milessince the last service. Reset the oil



life system whenever the oil ischanged. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑12.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑18.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspection ofhoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑76. Worn ordamaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑30.

. Tire inflation pressures check.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑53.

. Rotate tires if necessary. SeeTire Rotation on page 10‑54.

. Fluids visual leak check (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired and thefluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, and trunk lidhinges and latches lubrication.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Morefrequent lubrication may berequired when the vehicle isexposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑23.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.



. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. PCV system inspection. AnEmission Control Service. TheU.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency or the California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the failure toperform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

. Automatic transmission fluidlevel check and adding fluid, ifneeded. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should be

rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑54.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑9.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

Once a Month. Tire inflation pressures check.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑53.

. Sunroof track and sealinspection, if equipped. SeeSunroof on page 2‑16.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑28.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑29.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑29.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Underbody flushing service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection. Notto exceed 60 000 km/37,500 miles. An EmissionControl Service.



. Engine accessory drive beltinspection for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage andreplacement, if needed.

. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement (or every24 months, whichever occursfirst). More frequent replacementmay be needed if you drive inareas with heavy traffic, areaswith poor air quality, or areaswith high dust levels.Replacement may also beneeded if you notice reduced airflow, windows fogging up,or odors. Your dealer can helpyou determine when it is theright time to replace the filter.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid and

filter change (severe serviceonly) for vehicles mainly drivenin heavy city traffic in hotweather, in hilly or mountainousterrain, when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,

or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

. Power steering pump accessorydrive belt replacement.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.EVAP vent solenoid valvereplacement. An EmissionControl Service. The U.S.Environmental ProtectionAgency or the California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the failure toperform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Timing belt replacement.. Valve clearance adjustment.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or everyfive years, whichever occursfirst). See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18. An EmissionControl Service.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑18

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Solvent Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering System DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic TransmissionUse only T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88900925, inCanada 22689186).

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 89021806, in Canada 89021807).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Manual Transmission Shift Linkage Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96536696 A3081C

Engine Oil Filter 93185674 —

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 96962173 —

Spark Plugs 96476119 —

Wiper Blades – Hatchback

Driver Side – 55.9 cm (22.0 in) 96476652 —

Passenger Side – 45.7 cm (18.0 in) 96476656 —

Rear – 38.1 cm (15.0 in) 96301840 —

Wiper Blades – Sedan

Driver Side – 55.9 cm (22.0 in) 96476652 —

Passenger Side – 45.7 cm (18.0 in) 96476656 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”

under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 6.3 L 6.7 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 4.5 L 4.8 qt

Fuel Tank 45.0 L 11.9 gal

Transmission, Automatic 5.87 L 6.2 qt

Transmission, Manual 1.8 L 1.9 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.6L L4 6 Automatic and Manual 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Chevrolet OwnerCenter (U.S.) —www.chevyownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Store online service and

maintenance records. Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries



Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.



Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.



. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.



Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising yourservice consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offeryou one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.



Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts. Seeyour dealer for information regardingthe allowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursement will belimited and must be supported byoriginal receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.



Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle'sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, andmay not perform properly in

subsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts is not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.



Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure thatyour vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, and

telephone number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, and

telephone number. Vehicle license plate number. Vehicle make, model, and

model year. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Insurance company and policy

number. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑30.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify tothe facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair using

aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if your vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.



In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) or

www.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-36

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-30

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-26

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3AntennaMulti-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-25Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Inadvertent Power Saver . . . . . . 6-5Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-30Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17


i-2 INDEX

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-34

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-35Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-33

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

CCaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Central Door Unlock System . . . . 2-6Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-29

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-48

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55, 3-59Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Computer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


INDEX i-3

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Central Door UnlockingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-19Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-8Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21


i-4 INDEX

Engine (cont.)Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-25Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-36Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-35Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Requirements, California . . . . .9-35

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7


INDEX i-5

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-20

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Inadvertent Power BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6LightingIllumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4


i-6 INDEX

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

LocksCentral Door UnlockingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

NNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilChange Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-19Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24


INDEX i-7

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24Parking LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-31Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PowerMirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-8Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13


i-8 INDEX

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-23Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-22

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6, 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-59

SecurityVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-5Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

Service (cont.)Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-36

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . 10-32, 10-33

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-28Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19


INDEX i-9

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Storage AreasFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Tires (cont.)Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-51Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-50Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-39Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-74Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


i-10 INDEX

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

WWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-46Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-30WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

chevrolet aveo owner manual - 2011 black plate (1,1) … · chevrolet aveo owner manual - 2011...

Documents